2014 Dodge Challenger Owner&#39

2014 Dodge Challenger Owner&#39
2014 Challenger
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
FCA US LLC
14D491-126-AD
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Challenger
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Open The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .28 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .29
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .53
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .54
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .65
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .95
. . . . . .96
. . . . . .96
. . . . . .96
. . . . . .97
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatiYour vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enterintegral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into N-Go™, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
the ignition switch with either side up.
(EVIC) will display the ignition switch position (OFF/
ACC/RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your
If this vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Instrument Panel” for further information.
feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACCESSORY (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the Vehicle Security Alarm armed, will result in the alarm
sounding. Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery
is dead) into the ignition switch to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm or press the Start/Stop button to disarm
the security alarm.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
on the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull Remove the Start/Stop button (if equipped), place the shift
the key out with your other hand.
lever in PARK or place the manual transmission in REVERSE and apply the parking brake. Turn the Key Fob to
the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob. Refer to
“Starting And Operating/Starting Procedures” for further
information on removing the Start/Stop button.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ system, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sunroof — if equipped, and ignition-powered power outlets
will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door
will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this
condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob or
ignition module. Only remove the emergency key
for locking and unlocking the doors.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK or the
manual transmission in REVERSE, and remove the
Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the
vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition
switch is placed in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Start- After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posiing Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. In addition, if the light begins to
information.
flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used
SENTRY KEY®
an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. If the light remains
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unau- on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The with the electronics. This condition will result in the
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation engine being shut off after two seconds.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
or unlocked.
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
The system uses a Key Fob with factory-mated Remote seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. as possible by an authorized dealer.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Replacement Keys
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authovehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the
authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Customer Key Programming
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
performed at an authorized dealer.
and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch
for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
General Information
Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the folsubject to the following conditions:
lowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the
• This device must accept any interference that may be instrument cluster will flash.
received, including interference that may cause undeRearming Of The System
sired operation.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
after an additional 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF To Disarm The System
and the key is physically removed from the ignition. The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the the following methods:
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
vehicle:
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, • The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
key to the ON position.
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
NOTE: The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
• If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
Vehicle Security Alarm.
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the
alarm will sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the NOTE:
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courSecurity System Manual Override
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
Tamper Alert
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
doors or open any door.
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from disoutside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
ther information.
system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the
ignition switch disables the system from responding to any
button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving at speeds
5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from
responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE
transmitters.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door. The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument panel” for further information.
If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry),
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UN- the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button. ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE
transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF
position and the Key Fob removed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps: NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a proAlarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
grammed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds,
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK
button.
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
position and the Key Fob removed.
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
to its previous setting.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash
and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry),
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry
feature. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE
transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while
still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by
pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the
Key Fob removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to its previous setting.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
To Open The Trunk
the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two NOTE:
times within five seconds to open the trunk.
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry),
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
and horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
by the system.
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
Using The Panic Alarm
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
operation.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Transmitter Battery Replacement
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE ransmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the elastomer seal during removal.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
This device must accept any interference received, inbattery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on •
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved NOTE:
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
distance, check for these two conditions:
reduce this range.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
How To Use Remote Start
the battery is a minimum of three years.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
engine will remote start:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
• Shift lever in PARK
radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Hazard switch off
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Ignition key removed from ignition switch
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
To Enter Remote Start Mode
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away
from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could
cause serious injury or death.
Press and release the REMOTE START button on
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights
will flash and horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will
remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped).
Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and
release the START/STOP button. If the START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob into the ignition
switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or NOTE:
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-NNOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
Go™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-NStart request.
Go™ feature, the message “Insert Key/Turn To On” will
display in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob. Once
inserted, the message “Turn To On” will display in the
EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON/RUN.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ DOOR LOCKS
feature, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will
Manual Door Locks
display in the EVIC until you push the START button.
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
Cancel Remote Start
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following lock knob on each door trim panel upward.
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
• Any engine warning lights come on
• Low Fuel Light turns on
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK
• The brake pedal is pressed
Door Lock Knob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and either door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the
Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in the ignition,
and the ignition is in the OFF or ACC position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Power Door Lock Switch
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
through your EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- 4. The driver door is opened.
tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings” for additional
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
information.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled. KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door
NOTE:
handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. The
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
unlocked.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry door handle
and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle
will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security
alarm.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any Passive Entry RKE transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger
door handle to unlock both doors automatically. The
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
of the deck lid, press the button on the located on the
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitcenter of the light bar which is located on the deck lid
ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
above the license plate.
deck lid.
To Enter The Trunk:
Trunk Passive Entry Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock both
doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
2
Do NOT Grab The handle When Locking
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
door. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE:
• The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power
windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
and prevents window and seal damage.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped
Wind Buffeting
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an AUTO-down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
one window open, then open the other window to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the button will operate.
Trunk Release
Button
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
Trunk Release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or
by using the external release switch
located on the underside of the
decklid overhang. The release feature will function only when the
vehicle is in the unlock condition.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
Some of the most important safety features in your
energy during an impact event
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
all passengers
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
item in a seat — if equipped
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
Please pay close attention to the information in this
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) for
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
the driver and front outboard passenger
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering possible.
wheel
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltrisk of harm from a deploying air bag:
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
buckled up in a rear seat.
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Lap/Shoulder Belts
WARNING! (Continued)
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your body
and can take the forces of a collision best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of
part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the
belt is routed through the seat web guide. When the
belt is routed outside of the seat web guide, the latch
plate will contact the quarter trim panel. Grasp the
latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go
around your lap.
Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate To Buckle
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snug.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Removing Slack From Belt
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. shoulder belt.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
First Row
Second Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
Center
N/A
ALR
Passenger
ALR
ALR
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of • N/A — Not Applicable
the latch plate.
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
folded webbing.
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which
are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional
information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section. The
chart below defines the type of feature for each seating
position.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
the occupant’s chest.
(BeltAlert®)
Energy Management Feature
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle is equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
This vehicle is equipped with a driver and/front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver
or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
Advanced Air Bags.
the outboard side of the front seats.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Side • Steering Wheel and Column
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver,
• Instrument Panel
front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The
SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and • Knee Impact Bolsters
their covers are labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
authorized dealer immediately.
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
bag only.
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
• Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their
body outside of the window.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passengers, and position front occupants
for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colliThe ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
required for this vehicle.
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
severe initial deceleration.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
bags, SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
required, depending on several factors, including the type of collision.
severity and type of impact.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors, have deployed.
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliFront Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
away from an inflating air bag.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are where the side curtain air bag inflates. This especially
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This applies to children. The side curtain air bag is only about
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may Front And Side Impact Sensors
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
events.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Enhanced Accident Response System
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
window. The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds the communication network remains intact, and the
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted event the ORC will determine whether to have the
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
until the ignition key is turned off.
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
removed.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
changed from IGN ON/RUN to IGN OFF.
immediately.
If A Deployment Occurs
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
immediately after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
the air bag system.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation Maintaining Your Air Bag System
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inWARNING!
structions for cleaning.
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have decould cause it to fail when you need it. You could
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
bags will not be in place to protect you.
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
WARNING!
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conworks on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
cycled to the ON/RUN.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses.
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Child Restraints
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires NOTE:
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional inforbuckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
mation:
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriversthe rear seats rather than in the front.
childsafety-index-53.htm
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight
Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a
Convertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
with a five-point Harness, facing
forward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be
used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are
still less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No
N/A
Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Can two child restraints be
attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be
removed?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Always follow the directions of the child restraint 3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
here.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autochild seat. You may also move the front seat forward
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
to allow more room for the child seat.
belt following the instructions below. See the section
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatBelt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
ing position.
position has.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
tions to attach a tether anchor.
anchorages.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do
not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
more room for the child seat.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
vehicle seat.
“click”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the car seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether restraint.
anchor.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
any direction.
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Anchorage
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
Look behind the seating position where you
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconplan to install the child restraint to find the
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
seat forward to provide better access to the
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
1. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
2
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
a collision.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “MainteA long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energyconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during
the break in period. Add oil as required.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .107
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features
Of Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Things You Should Know About
Your Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .142 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .161
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment . . .152
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .162
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .167
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . .
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .174
. . . . . . .174
. . . . . . .175
. . . . . . .175
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .169
▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . . . . .178
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .180
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .183
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .184
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . .188
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .192
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Console Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Sliding Center Console Armrest . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
3
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards
the front of the vehicle.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Folding Mirrors
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand
toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the
control wand in the direction you want the mirror to
move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn
the control to the center position to prevent accidentally
moving a mirror.
3
Power Mirror Control
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use Visor
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invisor and pull rearward.
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows
you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using
simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ “Work” or
“Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s audio is
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile,”
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones.
Slide-On-Rod Extender
For Uconnect® Customer Support: U.S. residents - visit
www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400. Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no Uconnect® Phone Button
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone.
button and Voice
(Uconnect® Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
button) that will enable you
Command
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is to access the system. When you press the button you
available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
will hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Voice Command Button
Operation
Actual button location may vary with the radio. Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
“Operation” section.
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the
options.
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
details.
prompt.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device,” the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth® Device.”
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions. Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of
button on the radio control head.
the
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® weboptions at any prompt if you ask for help.
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
pairing instructions:
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
“Device Pairing.”
connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority
allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
and follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identiand priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
after the initial pairing process.
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial By Saying A Number
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial.”
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234 567 8901.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Press the
button to begin.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect® Phonebook,” in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
“Call.”
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect®
person you want to call.
website for supported phones.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previby Saying a Name” section.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
to the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
button to begin.
• Press the
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomphone is accessible.
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
instead of “Bob.”
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will allow
NOTE:
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry,
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
if desired.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more • Press the
button to begin.
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry.”
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
entry that you wish to edit.
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
phonebook entry that you are editing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry
to the main menu.
that you wish to delete or you can say “List Names” to
hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
you choose. To select one of the entries from the list,
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
button while the Uconnect® Phone is
press the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
playing the desired entry and say “Delete.”
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit • After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
Entry” feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
wish to delete.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
when the vehicle is not in motion.
language is deleted.
button to begin.
• Press the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
deleted or edited.
“Phonebook Delete.”
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook
• Press the
• Press the
button to begin.
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All.”
“Phonebook List Names.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you • The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
butdeleted.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
“Call.”
is deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
operations at this point.
deleted or edited.
• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button to accept the call. To reject the Progress
call. Press the
button until you hear a
call, press and hold the
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
rejected.
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to Conference Call
“Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
two calls, refer to “Conference Call” in this section.
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear joined into one conference call.
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To Three-Way Calling
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
button until you hear a single beep.
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While CurToggling Between Calls
rent Call is in Progress.” After the second call has
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
button until you
established, press and hold the
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have
indicating that the active and hold status of the two
been joined into one conference call.
calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
call. If the active call is terminated by the phone far
end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call
button until
back from hold, press and hold the
you hear a single beep.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
Redial
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
• Press the
button to begin.
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
“Redial.”
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that • After the ignition key is cycled to OFF, a call can
was dialed from your mobile phone.
continue on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duraNOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect® Phone.
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is cycled to OFF.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
Language Selection
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
using:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
button to begin.
• Press the
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
button to begin.
• Press the
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
language selection.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
voice commands will be in that language.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect® Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect® System,
• and have network coverage.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
“Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your chances If you need roadside assistance:
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the • Press the
button to begin.
mobile phone directly.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance.”
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assistance phone number using the Voice Command system. To
do this, press the button and say “Setup,” followed by
“Towing Assistance.” When prompted say 1-800-521-2779
for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and
1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
Paging
or automated customer service line. Some services reTo learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
Voice Mail Calling
buton your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
ton
and
say
the
sequence
you
wish
to
enter,
followed
by
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
For
example,
if
required
to
enter
your
the
word
“Send.”
with Automated Systems”.
PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send.” Saying a number,
or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send,” is also to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
be used for navigating through an automated cus- NOTE:
tomer service center menu structure, and to leave a
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
number on a pager.
network configurations. This is normal.
You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
use of this feature.
button and say “Send.” The
call and then press the
system will prompt you to enter the name or number Barge In — Overriding Prompts
and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
send. The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corre- wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
sponding phone number associated with the phone- command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
book entry, as tones over the phone.
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
button to begin.
• Press the
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
one of the following:
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situayour mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
notification to inform you of your phone and network that the call did not go through even though the call is in
status when you are attempting to make a phone call progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the
button
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the
and
say
“Transfer
Call.”
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
order to mute the Uconnect® Phone:
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Press the
button to begin.
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You can also press the
button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
that you wish to select.
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone • The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
button and say “Sebeing announced, press the
lect” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired
phone.
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
• When prompted, say “List Phones.”
Select Another Mobile Phone
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
This feature allows you to select and start using another • Press the
button to begin.
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
• Press the
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
prompts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
• You can also press the
button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone
you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training,”
“System Training,” or “Start Voice Training” command.
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to restore
the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For best results, the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
Voice Training session should be completed when the
vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows
Voice Training
closed, and the blower fan switched off.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect® This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures: Reset
From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from • Press the
button.
radio mode):
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, Performance is maximized under:
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
• Low-to-medium blower setting
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
Voice Command
• Low road noise
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the • Smooth road surface
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Fully closed windows
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Dry weather condition
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
NOTE:
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
cents, the system may not always work for some.
during a Voice Command period.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance
not in motion is recommended.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• Low-to-medium blower setting
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are • Low road noise
not similar.
• Smooth road surface
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
• Fully closed windows
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
• Dry weather conditions, and
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
number combinations may not be supported.
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect® Phone.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
compromised with the convertible top down.
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for
you.
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download,” Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom- After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
ing and Missed Calls.
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
Recent Calls
SMS
Send Messages:
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
your phone.
a new message:
Read Messages:
• Press the
button.
If you receive a new text message while your phone is • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
If you wish to hear the new message:
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
button.
• Press the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
To send a message, press the
button while the system 9. Call me later
is listing the message and say “Send.”
10. Thanks
Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
11. See You in 15 minutes
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
12. I am on my way
List of Preset Messages:
13. I’ll be late
1. Yes
14. Are you there yet?
2. No
15. Where are we meeting?
3. Where are you?
16. Can this wait?
4. I need more direction
17. Bye for now
5. L O L
18. When can we meet?
6. Why
19. Send number to call
7. I love you
20. Start without me
8. Call me
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
Bluetooth® ON mode.
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
Power-Up
• Press the
button.
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
will then be given a choice to change it.
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
• This device must accept any interference received,
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
button, you menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a the active application.
command.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few a normal speaking volume.
seconds, the system will present you with a list of The system will best recognize your speech if the winoptions.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists set to low.
button, listen for At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
options, press the Voice Command
the beep, and say your command.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Combutton and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
mand
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
Commands
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands.
Main Menu
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
commands are available if the supported radio mode is Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
active.
main menu.
Changing The Volume
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
Streaming mode)
Radio FM
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Radio AM
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Satellite Radio
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
USB Mode
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
Disc Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
may say the following commands:
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Memo Mode
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the Setup
butrecording, you may press the Voice Command
ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
the following commands:
• “Change to system setup”
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Main menu system setup”
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Switch to system setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Change to setup”
During the playback you may press the Voice Com- • “Main menu setup” or
button to stop playing memos. You pro- • “Switch to setup”
mand
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Language English”
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Language French”
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the Voice Training
• “Language Spanish”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
• “Tutorial”
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re• “Voice Training”
peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
last trained voice only.
button first and wait for the beep before
Command
SEATS
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Voice Training
vehicle.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect®
WARNING!
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to
or killed.
the system and will improve recognition.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
Power Seats
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are
used to control the position of the seat.
Power Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
raise and lower the position of the support.
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front driver and passenger seats may be equipped
with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The
heaters provide the same average heat level for both the
cushion and the seatback.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each seat are located near the bottom center
of the instrument panel.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
If HIGH-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the LOW-level after a maximum of 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one,
indicating the change. Operation on the LOW-level setting also turns OFF automatically after a maximum of 45
minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near
within two to five minutes.
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
3
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located
on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback
and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily
remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and
allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows
for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a
normal seating position, first return the seatback to its
original recline location and then slide the entire seat
back to the pre-set lock position.
Easy Entry Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Push Button
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the
upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or
both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when
not in use.
3
Folded Rear Seat
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Folding Rear Seat
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Safety Catch
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlights And Parking Lights
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light
and instrument panel light operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition in the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headunlit area.
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
Automatic Headlights Only)
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place position, the headlights are off and the parking brake is
the ignition in the RUN position again, the system will released. The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will If vehicle is equipped with High Intensity Discharge
(HID) headlights, the front turn signal lamps provide the
turn off in the normal manner.
DRL function. If equipped, the DRL will flash when a
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
turn signal is in operation, and return to DRL mode when
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
the turn signal is no longer flashing.
feature.
The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) whenever the ignition is placed in the RUN
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
3
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and
press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either press the headlight switch again or turn off the
headlight switch.
Fog Light Operation
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
steering column.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved,
it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Multifunction Lever
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
High/Low Beam Switch
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
Overhead Console
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch.
doors are open.
Dimmer Control
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
The dimmer control is located to the right of the headRotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
light switch. With the parking lights or headlights on,
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
brightness of the instrument panel lights and, if
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets, door
handles and cupholders.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in settings for high-speed wiper operation.
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction
CAUTION!
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Mist Feature
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
three wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray
and then turn off.
from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate
until you release the multifunction lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO)
position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward. The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel right side of the steering wheel.
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
1 — ON/OFF
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 2 — RES +
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the U.S. Speed (mph)
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
out erasing the set speed memory.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
To Resume Speed
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed Metric Speed (km/h)
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
To Vary The Speed Setting
2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
the new set speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can dethe new set speed will be established.
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed To Accelerate For Passing
To Decrease Speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
the new set speed will be established.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in (150 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
ParkSense® Warning Display
ParkSense® Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Pro- will turn ON indicating the system status.
grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Park Assist Ready
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Park Assist System Off
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
59 in (150 cm)
None
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
59-39 in
39-25 in
(150-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled through the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC.
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
When ParkSense® is disabled, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift
lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the ⬙SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will
display the ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ or ⬙WIPE
OFF REAR SENSORS⬙ message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will
not operate.
If ⬙WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS⬙appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ appears in the
EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
• When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instrubumper.
ment cluster will display ⬙PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
OFF⬙ for five seconds. Furthermore, once you turn • Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
30 cm from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will
ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
EVIC.
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights At the forward end of the overhead console are two
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener courtesy/reading lights.
(HomeLink®) button and a power sunroof switch may Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
also be included, if equipped.
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
Overhead Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
3
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink® channels.
HomeLink® Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
NOTE:
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manuposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The Electronic identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display “CLEAR- where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
ING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
displays “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
button may vary by manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
button you want to program and the hand - held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
NOTE:
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
for the channel to train.
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
Step 2.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
release the button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
seconds each time). The EVIC will display “CHANsteps.
NEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to before 1995.
complete the training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button.
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to proThe EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If
gram.
the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
button you want to program and the hand - held To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter button.
erase the channels.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
NEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
NOTE:
follow these steps:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases 1.
for the channel to train.
2.
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
Step 2.
Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
button while you press and release (“cycle”), your
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
hand - held transmitter every two seconds.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANCanadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigNEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transCanadian/Gate Operator Programming
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® NOTE:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
for the channel to train.
time-out in the same manner.
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
Step 2.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button.
The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
the device is plugged in and activates, programming is
complete.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
program.
programming, plug it back in at this time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
Security
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
follow these steps:
in your vehicle.
To erase the channels press and hold the two outside
HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
“CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when
release the button.
the EVIC displays “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink®
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
To operate, press and release the programmed here are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera- • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light- • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
also be used at any time.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
General Information
NOTE:
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not extwo conditions:
pressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
device.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
• The term IC before the certification/registration numreceived including interference that may cause undeber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specisired operation.
fications were met.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
Opening Sunroof — Express
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiPress the switch rearward and release it within one-half cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati- Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will the sunroof.
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
Sunshade Operation
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Venting Sunroof — Express
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurPress and release the Vent button within one half second rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Sunroof Maintenance
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
the glass panel.
on this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
Information Center (EVIC)
lighter unit. If desired, the front power outlet can be
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® cigar
feature.
knob and element must be used.
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Front Power Outlet
The center console power outlet is powered directly from
the battery (power available at all times).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
3
Center Console Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the 1 — #18 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.
2 — #9 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty.
3
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
Front Cupholders
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Front Cupholders — If Equipped
The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs. They
are turned on with the headlights or parking lights. Refer
to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Rear Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
CONSOLE FEATURES
Console Storage
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest, and also contains a 12 Volt
The center console armrest slides forward with three
power outlet, a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold
detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use
various size coins). The center console may also be
and shifting ease.
equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and
iPhone® devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface
(UCI) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Sliding Center Console Armrest
Sliding Console Armrest
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
Center Console
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Sport Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .210
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped . . . .224
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .225
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Compass Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ System Warnings (Customer Information
Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . .239
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .247
䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .248
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .248
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play. . . . . .258
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play . . . . .259
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . .270
䡵 HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .271
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .274
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .275
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .275
▫ Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Blower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlets
— Instrument Cluster
— Glove Compartment
— Radio
— Heated Seat Switch
6 — ESC OFF Switch
7 — Sport Button
8 — Hazard Warning Switch
9 — Heated Steering Wheel Switch
10 — Climate Control
11 — Ignition Switch
12 — Trunk Release Button
13 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is on.
2. Trip Odometer Button
5. Tachometer
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
reset it.
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
area.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or
turns on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
non-essential electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly
increase engine speed (if at idle). If the light remains on,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
it means that the charging system is experiencing a vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authoproblem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain rized dealer for service as soon as possible.
service immediately.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting immediate service is required. In this case, you may
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
the light does not come on during starting.
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/
RUN position. This light will also turn on while 8. Temperature Gauge
the engine is running if there is a problem with the
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaplace the shift lever in PARK, for manual transmission
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
place the transmission in neutral, apply the parking
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
brake, and cycle the ignition key. The light should turn
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” and you hear a chime, turn the engine OFF
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself,
refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle” and follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
9. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
10. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho- 12. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Vehicle” for further information.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
This light will turn on and a single chime will
engine
running.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Insound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
When this light turns on, the engine temperature is
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
critically hot. Further overheating will cause a continusystem. If this light remains on after several ignition
ous chime will sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
allowed to cool. If the light turns on while driving, safely
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as posproblem diagnosed and corrected.
sible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information).
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
to ON/RUN.
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the chime will sound when this light turns on.
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds 15. High Beam Indicator
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
This indicator will turn on when the high beam
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever
13. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
Light — If Equipped
high beam.
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
placed in ON/RUN. A chime will sound if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The
Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the
bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
19. Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display Area
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for
additional information.
17. Shift Lever Indicator — Automatic Transmission NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transOnly
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
automatic transmission.
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected.
The EVIC features a driver-interactive display, for further The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacinformation refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
ter (EVIC)”.
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
20. Brake Warning Light
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
This light monitors various brake functions, dropped below a specified level.
including brake fluid level and parking brake
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condithe anti-lock brake system reservoir.
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
22. Tire
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until
the vehicle is disarmed.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
should be checked monthly when cold and
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apinflated to the inflation pressure recommended
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuously
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subseAccordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the syspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has to continue to function properly.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
24. Low Fuel Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine
start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key
from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety
of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on
the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display which is located in the • System Status
instrument cluster.
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Uconnect® phone (If Equipped)
• Uconnect® gps Screens (If Equipped)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Audio Mode Display
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Surround Sound Modes (if equipped with Driver- MENU Button
Selectable Surround [DSS])
Press and release the MENU button to access
The system allows the driver to select information by
the main menu, or to return to the main menu
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
from the sub-menus.
wheel:
UP Button
Press and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menus and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and
sub-menus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
SELECT Button
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Press and release the SELECT button for access to • Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal
setting in the setup menu. Press and hold the • Door Ajar
SELECT button for two seconds to reset features. • Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• Oil Change Required
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
the following messages:
• Channel # Transmit
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if • Channel # Training
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
• Channel # Trained
either turn signal on)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Clearing Channels
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Channels Cleared
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Did Not Train
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime)
• Key Fob Not Detected
• Service TPM System (with a single chime)
• Press Brake & Push Button to Start
• Tire Pressure Display Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate • Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to
Tire to XX”
“Remote Starting System” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle”)
• ESC Off – Electronic Stability Control is deactivated
• 1–4 SKIPSHIFT
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped
• Check Gascap
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on ve• Key Fob Battery Low
hicles with a manual transmission, or when a vehicle with
an automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The
• Service Keyless System
GSI provides the driver with a visual indication within the
• Wrong Key
EVIC when the recommended gear shift point has been
reached. This indication notifies the driver that changing
• Damaged Key
gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption.
• Key not Programmed
When the shift up indicator (+) is shown on the display,
• Vehicle Not in Park
the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
When the shift down indicator (-) is shown on the display, Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower gear.
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
The GSI indicator in the EVIC remains illuminated until
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions return
message temporarily, press and release the MENU butto a situation where changing gear is not required to
ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
improve fuel consumption.
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the folEngine Oil Change Indicator System
lowing procedure.
Oil Change Required
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent 3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
upon your personal driving style.
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
• Trip B
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do • Elapsed Time
not start the engine.)
• Display Units of Measure in
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Press the UP or DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
within 10 seconds.
Trip Computer functions.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode —
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
If Equipped
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Trip Functions
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
history information will be erased, and the averaging
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
will continue from the last fuel average reading before
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
the reset.
• Distance To Empty
• Trip A
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
• The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above • This feature allows you to monitor when you are
the average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This
driving in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to
message will appear whenever the Multimodify driving habits in order to increase fuel
Displacement System (MDS) (if equipped) allows the
economy.
engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner.
Fuel Saver Mode–Off
Fuel Saver Mode–On
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Trip A
• Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance
is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the
current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through
the SELECT button.
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
• Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle • Elapsed Time
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
• When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will or START position.
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display • Display Units of Measure in
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
To Reset The Display
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
resettable functions, press and release the SELECT button
a second time within three seconds of resetting the
currently-displayed function. (>Reset ALL will display
during this three-second window.)
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-NGo™ icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display
showing the new ignition switch position.
4
Sport Mode
This light will illuminate when the sport mode
is selected. This mode provides performance
based tuning. For further information, refer to
”Sport Mode” in “Starting And Operating”.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the
new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition
switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible
by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display
appears.
• Stereo
• Surround Sound
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the SELECT
button to change surround modes. The Video Surround
Mode will only be available for video media sources
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting And Oper(DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media supported by
ating” for more information.
the radio).
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
Compass Display — If Equipped
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display MENU Button
always re-appears.
The compass readings indicate the direction
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) —
If Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides information on the current surround mode.
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
MENU button until “Compass” displays in the
EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Manual Compass Calibration
Automatic Compass Calibration
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal
Settings displays in the EVIC.
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is 3. Press the UP or DOWN button until “CALIBRATE
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
COMPASS” displays in the EVIC.
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
calibration. The message “CAL” will display in the
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
EVIC.
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
5. Slowly complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an
area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” message turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
Compass Variance Map
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal
Settings displays in the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
3. Press the UP or DOWN button until “COMPASS • Tire Pressure
VARIANCE” message and the last variance zone
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING
number displays in the EVIC.
THE SPARE TIRE).
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
variance zone is selected according to the map.
Features)
5. Press and release the MENU button to exit.
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
System Warnings (Customer Information
Features)
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal SetPress and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM tings displays in the EVIC.
WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the Up or Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
DOWN button to display any one of the following following choices.
choices.
Language
• Oil Temperature
When in this display you may select one of three lanShows the actual oil temperature.
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the Uconnect® gps (if equipped). Press the
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SELECT button while in this display to select English, Remote Key Unlock
Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the informa- When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
tion will display in the selected language.
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect® lan- Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
guage selection.
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenLock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
ger door. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, both of
When ON is selected, both doors will lock automatically the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless EnterWhen ON is selected, both doors will unlock when the N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
make your selection, press and release the SELECT grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
programmed touching the handle more than once will
only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door
first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the
interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make Delay Turning Headlights Off
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available With Auto
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
Headlamps Only)
and release the SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the “90” appears.
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock
AUTO (A) position, the headlamps will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlamps will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
Turn-by-Turn Navigation — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “OFF,”
“30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
Delay Power Off To Accessories Until Exit
Display ECO Mode — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the power window switches,
radio, Uconnect® phone (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. Opening either front vehicle door will cancel
this feature. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,”
“30 min.,” or “60 min.” appears.
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display; this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry)
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has Display Units Of Measure In
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect® gps (if equipped)
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
can be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph IF EQUIPPED
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To Refer to your Uconnect® 730N, 430 or 430N user’s
make your selection, press and release the SELECT manual for detailed operating instructions.
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark — If Equipped
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
operating information.
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
Uconnect® 130
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
will begin to blink.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conanother selection. Holding either button will bypass
trol knob to save time change.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
TIME Button
RW/FF
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
and radio frequency.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
Clock Setting Procedure
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. AM or FM frequencies.
SEEK Buttons
TUNE Control
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SCROLL control knob.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Memory
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
treble tones.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but DISC Button
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the MP3 Audio Play
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM NOTE:
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
to operate the radio.
pressing the pushbutton twice.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
button number will display.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit
to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
(Continued)
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
TIME Button
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
button operates in a similar manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
Layer
3
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Playback Of MP3 Files
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio
checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot
of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start
playing the MP3 files.
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected vehicle speakers.
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
ACC position to operate the radio.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
another selection. Holding either button will bypass Clock Setting Procedure
stations without stopping, until you release it.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
SCROLL control knob.
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone —
If Equipped
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
details.
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
screen.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TIME Button
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
and radio frequency.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
procedure, starting at step 2.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
TUNE Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control format types:
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
16-Digit Character
the front and rear speakers.
Program Type
Display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
No program type or
None
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
undefined
MUSIC TYPE Button
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Classical
Classicl
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
College
College
seconds will allow the program format type to be seCountry
Country
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Foreign Language
Language
Music Type information.
Information
Inform
Jazz
Jazz
News
News
Nostalgia
Nostalga
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL con- You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
save time change.
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
AM/FM Button
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button number will display.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit
to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
RW/FF
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
works in a similar manner.
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When
reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly
and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranApple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
the file name and folder name, and will assign a number
Supported Media (Disc Types)
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceedThe MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
supported.
before writing to the disc.
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
time to start playing the MP3 files.
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
by the following:
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than playable files).
CD-R media
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file. TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
ignition is OFF).
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which If Equipped
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may
begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service
that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio
system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that
contains general information, including how to setup your
on-line listening account. For further information, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian
residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number Reception Quality
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
the radio to exit this screen.
following reasons:
Selecting Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
structure or under a physical obstacle.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
mode.
form of short audio mutes.
Satellite Antenna
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
cause intermittent reception.
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions — Uconnect® Multimedia
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly (Satellite) Mode
on or above the antenna.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
to normal display).
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will RW/FF
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
without stopping until you release it.
direction of the arrows.
SCAN Button
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before conto increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
MUSIC TYPE Button
button a second time.
SEEK Buttons
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaturning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five section between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availonds will allow the program format type to be selected.
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
INFO Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
type.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
and press and release that button. If a button is not
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
stored into pushbutton memory.
SETUP Button
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
following items:
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription.
twice.
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button NOTE:
number will display.
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect® Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
Buttons 1 - 6
iPod® or external USB device support capability.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
or glove compartment.
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions which is located in the center console or glove compartmay not fully support the iPod® control features. Please ment.
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
NOTE: The center console will have a position where the
iPod® or consumer electronic audio device cable can be
routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be
routed may be located in the base of the center console on
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the center console base, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX”
button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and
say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod®/USB/
Using This Feature
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
connect to the USB port:
Play Mode
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
etc.) information on the radio display.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents. USB device and display data:
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previthe USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
ous track.
audio device).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while • Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the VR
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
Track.⬙
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
track.
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
holding the FF>> button.
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off.⬙
jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous
and next tracks.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
⬙Shuffle Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay
in updating the information on the radio display may
be noticeable.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in • Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of
on the top line and the first item in that list on the
the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclocksecond line.
wise) to get to the track faster.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or exter• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
nal USB device:
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item
• Preset 2 – Artists
to be selected and press the TUNE control knob. This
will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
• Preset 3 – Albums
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
• Preset 4 – Genres
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect® phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the
radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Streaming Audio.”
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Selecting A Different Audio Device
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
playing will display info.
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
Next Track
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon® audio
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior
track on your cellular phone.
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and
reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes
Previous Track
proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliverUse the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on ing substantial increases in component and system effithe radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the ciency levels.
previous music track on your cellular phone.
1. Press the PHONE button to begin.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge™ high efficiency
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power
supply and drives a 7.4-channel playback architecture.
The Harman Kardon® audio system offers the ability to
choose Logic 7® surround sound for any audio source.
The GreenEdge™ high-efficiency speaker designs ensure
the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in
dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for
maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat
surround sound processing.
Selecting “Surround Sound” through the Uconnect®
radio activates the Harman Kardon® Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology in your vehicle. Some
audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
mode.
When in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available in surround mode
but should be set to the center position for optimal
surround performance.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology deliv- IF EQUIPPED
ers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
position This surround effect is available for audio from surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard access the switches.
AUX input; and is activated through Uconnect® radio
touchscreen. Refer to “Customer Programmable Features” under “Uconnect® SETTINGS” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
will tune to the next preset station that you have promode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once precautions:
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
surface.
seconds after the current track begins to play.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
wiping from center to edge.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
center button will select the next available CD in the
or anti-static sprays.
player.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
4
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
Automatic Temperature Control
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
Operation of the system is quite simple.
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
Turn the Mode Control knob (right knob) and the Blower system completely and closes the outside air intake.
Control knob (left knob) to AUTO.
The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat average person is 72°F (22°C); however, this may vary.
occupants only.
NOTE:
Automatic Operation
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
Dial in the temperature you would
without affecting automatic operation.
like the system to maintain by rotating
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
the Temperature Control knob (center
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
knob). Once the comfort level is seto flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
lected, the system will maintain that
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
level automatically using the heating
air conditioning is not necessary.
system. Should the desired comfort
level require air conditioning, the system will automati- • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
cally make the adjustment.
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
Blower Control
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
For full automatic operation or for
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
automatic blower operation, turn the
rotating the Blower Control knob (left knob).
blower knob to the AUTO position. In
manual mode there are seven blower NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
speeds that can be individual selected. Operation Chart that follows for details.
In off position the blower will shut off.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (right knob) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and
• Panel
side window demist outlets.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru- • Mix
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
airflow.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
for maximum airflow to the rear.
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot,
mum blower and temperature settings for best windthere is a difference in temperature between the upper
shield and side window defrosting.
and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor
outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during
sunny but cool conditions.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Air Conditioner Control
NOTE:
Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
flow through the outlets selected with
mode is not allowed in defrost mode in order to
the Mode control dial. Press this butimprove window clearing. Recirculation will be diston a second time to turn OFF the air
abled automatically if these modes are selected.
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to
manual compressor operation is selected.
fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press
• Recirculation Control
the Recirculation button to return to outside air. Some
The system will automatically control recircutemp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior
air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
this reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be
Control button will put the system in recircuselected while in defrost mode. Attempting to use the
lation mode. This can be used when outside
recirculation while in defrost mode will cause the LED in
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
the control button to blink and then turn off.
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
the control button to illuminate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Operating Tips
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
Summer Operation
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
The engine cooling system must be protected with a adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro- of compressor damage when the system is started again.
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
Window Fogging
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly reStandard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winVehicle” for proper coolant selection.
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Winter Operation
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months rainy or humid weather.
is not recommended because it may cause window
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
fogging.
long periods as fogging may occur.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Side Window Demisters
A/C Air Filter
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the
vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service information or see
your authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Maintenance
Schedules” for filter service intervals.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions While In Manual Override
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . .299
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .290
▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .291
▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ — If Equipped . . . . . . .292
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ 1–4 Skip Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .298
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .306
5
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵
䡵
䡵
䡵
䡵
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .306 䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .322
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .322
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .316
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .327
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .327
DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .331
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .335
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .343
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .347
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .350
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .358
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .360
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .361
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
5
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission) . . .370
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) . . . . . .371
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .378
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .372
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . .384
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . .392
5
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL
and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle. This
vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition
system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to
the floor.
Normal Starting With Integrated Key —
Manual Transmission
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and cycle the
ignition switch to the START position and release when
the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15
seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a
discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What
To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-NGo™ Key Fob is in the passenger
compartment.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 Installing And Removing The ENGINE
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the START/STOP Button
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat Installing The Button
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
the engine starting, press the button again.
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
the button loose.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
accelerator pedal.
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
Manual Transmission Only
Normal Starting
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pressing and
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Automatic Transmission Only
2. Release the button when the engine starts. If the
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds, release the
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
button, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
Starting” procedure.
Removing The Button
5
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, release the button.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
EVIC (if equipped) will display a “VEHICLE NOT IN
PARK” message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Automatic Transmission
Only
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
Only
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the 1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in
NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will
START/STOP button.
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions — With Driver’s
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
3. Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and then
Or NEUTRAL Position)
apply the parking brake.
The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an
NOTE:
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and
• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position. steps:
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the 1. Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
the engine is not running.
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
switch position will remain in the ACC position until
the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice
to the OFF position.
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Automatic Transmission
Only
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Manual Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15
seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch
pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
After Starting
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
hold it.
decrease as the engine warms up.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
as soon as the starter engages.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal,
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
three-wire extension cord.
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is
located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Six-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchronizer damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage to the transmission may occur.
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in- Shifting
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
warms up. This is normal.
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting.
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
Manual Shifter
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
may result in transmission damage.
You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when starting
from a standing position.
Recommended Shift Speeds
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED
SHIFT SPEEDS
Axle
1-4
4-5
5-6
Ratio
3.73
mph
20
25
42
(km/h)
(32)
(40)
(67)
3.91
mph
20
37
48
(km/h)
(32)
(59)
(77)
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recom- steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
mended shift speed chart.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with
the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position
for Keyless Enter-N-Go™), as compared to the ignition
LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-NGo™). This is normal operation of the transmission
reverse inhibitor system.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it
may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.
Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an
indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.
1–4 Skip Shift
There are times when you must shift the transmission
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first
gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs
when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F
(41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is
in first gear, and the accelerator is at ¼ throttle or less.
The “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” will be displayed
during these times.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
When the “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” is displayed, the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from
first gear to fourth gear. After you shift the transmission
to fourth gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to
another forward gear.
Downshifting
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downshift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
grade.
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
CAUTION!
• If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you
could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
• Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is
moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could
damage the engine and/or clutch.
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the full OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go ™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the full OFF
(key removal) position. The key fob can only be removed
from the ignition when the ignition is in the full OFF
position, and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the full OFF position.
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
hundred miles (kilometers).
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
pedal must be pressed.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section). Moving the shift lever to
the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or
tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles
(-/+) (if equipped), will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
5
Shift Lever
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
NOTE:
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow vehicle in this range.
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
especially important when the engine is cold.
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle brake.
the ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
OFF position first.
to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move
the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine off, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the full OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
NEUTRAL (N)
CAUTION!
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
SPORT — If Equipped
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are indamaging the transmission.
creased to make full use of available engine power.
To toggle between normal mode and SPORT mode, press
the SPORT switch on the instrument panel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required.
following steps:
Overdrive Operation
1. Stop the vehicle.
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
5. Restart the engine.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no • The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
AUTOSTICK®
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your providing manual shift control, giving you more control
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize endiagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
recur.
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
system can also provide you with more control during or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maxiWhen the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
mum engine speed is reached.
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply • If AutoStick® is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
transmission will remain in the selected gear even
tap the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the
when maximum engine speed is reached. The transDRIVE position, or tap one of the steering wheelmission will upshift only when commanded by the
mounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped. Tapping (-) to
driver. Engine overspeed protection will be provided
enter AutoStick® mode will downshift the transmission
by fuel cut off at or near redline.
to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter
AutoStick® mode will retain the current gear. When • The transmission will automatically downshift as the
AutoStick® is active, the current transmission gear is
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick® mode,
display the current gear.
the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is
manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever, or
the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine lugging
Operation
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the
right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped)
until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick® mode at
any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
pedal.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or
WARNING!
icy conditions.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. On
the center console, there is a “SPORT” button that when
pressed the vehicle will enter “SPORT” mode.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
SPORT Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precauDriving through water more than a few inches/
tions should be observed:
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
slushy.
Flowing/Rising Water
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Traction
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
(Continued)
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electrohydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM”
message and a flashing icon are displayed on • Even if power steering assistance is no longer operathe EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Underand during parking maneuvers.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP - SEE
service.
OWNER’S MANUAL” message and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an — IF EQUIPPED
over temperature condition in the power steering system. This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
You will lose power steering assistance momentarily off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
until the over temperature condition no longer exists. and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Under- NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position. wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
Enter-N-Go™), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instru- before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
ment cluster will illuminate.
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
NOTE:
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
PARKING BRAKE
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake,
firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and
let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release
Automatic Transmission Parking Brake
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic wheel lock-up.
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
by increased pedal travel during application, greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential axle.
activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”
BRAKE SYSTEM
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
of the stop
related motor noises. These noises are the system per- These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
WARNING!
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can ininterference caused by improperly installed or high
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
output radio transmitting equipment. This interferdebris, or panic stops.
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
You also may experience the following when the brake
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
system goes into anti-lock:
performed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping
of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
their
effectiveness
and may lead to a collision.
short time after the stop)
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• Brake pedal pulsations
(Continued)
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The
light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning
Light” is not on.
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
accurate signals for the computer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
possible.
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrauIf both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
required.
5
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This
system includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), the
TCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake Assist
System), and the ESC (Electronic Stability Control). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill
Start Assist (HSA) is standard on all models.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABSequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appliA feature of the TCS system, Brake Lock Differential cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
This can help reduce braking distances.
(BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” or ⬙Full Off⬙ unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this is released, the BAS is deactivated.
section for more information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 3% (approximate) for manual
transmission and 6% (approximate) for automatic transmissions.
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backthe level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90
seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight
forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec- 6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec- 7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understandswitch bank below the climate controls) four times
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
within 20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
times.
following steps:
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
additional half-turn to the right.
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
back to the ON position. If the sequence was combrake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
pleted properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Inthe condition of oversteer or understeer.
dicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
is disabled.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
to it’s previous setting.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
5
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two or three available operating
modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch and the ⬙ESC Off Indicator Light⬙ will illuminate.
To turn the ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC
Off” switch and the ⬙ESC Off Indicator Light⬙ will turn
off.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESC ON again by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
except for the limited wheel spin feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the
“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
chime will sound, the ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ will
illuminate, and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the
vehicle odometer. The “ESC OFF” message may appear
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily press
the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: The ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
into the PARK position from any position other than
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
will occur when the message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
NOTE: When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the
“ESC Off” switch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authotime the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
position.
diagnosed and corrected.
• Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was cycled off
previously.
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
Tire Markings
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading
Information Placard
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety
• Economy
• Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both underinflation and over-inflation affect the
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a auservice description (Load Index and Speed Code).
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
Tire Types
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
All Season Tires — If Equipped
the tire sidewall.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
tire inflation pressures.
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more inforpoorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
tire rotation pattern.
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
In Emergencies” for further information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
first opportunity.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to
replaced.
“Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
• Due to limited clearance, P235/55R18 or P225/60R18
tire with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6
low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
Tire Rotation
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
mended cold placard pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn ON the “TPM Telltale Light.” Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the “TPM Telltale Light” will still be
ON. In this situation, the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
the tire.
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
Base System
or condition.
NOTE:
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
while adjusting your tire pressure.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. readings to the receiver module.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
stopping ability.
and to maintain the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components:
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure • Receiver module,
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
• Four TPM sensors, and
to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light.”
• TPM Telltale Light
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. The “TPM Telltale Light” will
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE” message will
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure
is low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
the TPM sensors.
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire
materials that may block radio wave signals.
pressures, the system will automatically update and the
“TPM Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE” message will turn 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
wheel housings.
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
to receive this information.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Service TPMS Warning
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the compact spare tire.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE” message will turn OFF,
as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime
will sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn ON
and a “LOW TIRE” message will be displayed for a
Premium System — If Equipped
minimum of five seconds.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will readings to the receiver module.
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE”
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing. An
⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message will also be displayed in the
EVIC display.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition
(those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as
shown in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the “TPM Telltale Light” will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate
which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place message is then followed with a graphic display with
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
following:
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
the TPM sensors.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
the compact spare tire.
wheel housings.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
“TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
display a flashing pressure value and the ⬙Inflate Tire
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
to XX⬙ message.
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
TPMS to receive this information.
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
General Information
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off following conditions:
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a • This device may not cause harmful interference.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) • This device must accept any interference received, includin place of the pressure value.
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, ing licenses:
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
MRXC4W4MA4
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in United States
the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World3.6L Engine — If Equipped
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
This engine is designed to meet all emis- and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recomsions regulations and provide excellent mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifuel economy and performance when us- fications if they are available.
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission)
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
The 3.6L and 5.7L engine (with automatic
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
transmission) is designed to meet all emisengines.
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
fuel economy and performance when usyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recomrequired. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
mends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance.
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it 5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission)
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
The 5.7L engine (with manual transmission) is designed to meet all emissions
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
regulations and provide excellent fuel
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
economy and performance when using
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
high-quality premium unleaded gasoline
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- with an octane rating of 91 or higher.
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
Reformulated Gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are speWide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imnecessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
prove air quality.
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci- The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will profications, if they are available.
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems
and may damage critical fuel system components.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E-85
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of methanol.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
E-85 perform the following:
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine Materials Added To Fuel
controller memory.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
exposure to E-85 fuel.
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
MMT In Gasoline
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) fuel.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
(Continued)
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
WARNING! (Continued)
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
NOTE:
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. the vehicle is started.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further inforthat the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is mation.
refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the • Type of Vehicle
“Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
The best way to figure out the total weight of your driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
it is not over the GVWR.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed Common Towing Definitions
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
and GAWRs.
you in understanding the following information:
TRAILER TOWING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
and recommendations in this manual concerning veThe GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
hicles used for trailer towing.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temManual Transmission — If Equipped
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Tongue Weight (TW)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
and trailer when weighed in combination.
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
part of the load on your vehicle.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Frontal Area
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- maximum width of the front of a trailer.
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
Trailer Sway Control
information.
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
WARNING!
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fricIt is important that you do not exceed the maximum tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight Distribution hitched
are recommended for loads in excess of 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
WARNING! (Continued)
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
3.6L Automatic
5.7L Automatic
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
12 sq ft (1.11 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
12 sq ft (1.11 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area
Max. Tongue Wt.
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the many trailer collisions.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the your bumper or trailer hitch.
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
Trailer And Tongue Weight
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
5
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and
it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo
that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur
that may be difficult for the driver to control. You
could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor- • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
WARNING!
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
wiring harness.
3 — Ground
Four-Pin Connector
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower gear.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent • To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necesproper maintenance intervals.
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
conditions allow.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Cooling System
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick®
• When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF The
Ground
None
Front
Rear
All
Manual Transmission
Automatic Transmission
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will
occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the
ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may
occur.
Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will
occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the
ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may
occur.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .397 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .410
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . .411
䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .399
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
6
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
6
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
TIREFIT Storage
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk.
6
TIREFIT Components
TIREFIT Location
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on bottom
side of TIREFIT Kit)
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Using The Power Button
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this Using The Deflation Button
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Sealant Mode
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant and to
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
selecting this mode.
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose
TIREFIT Expiration Date Location
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only inuse. Always replace these components immediately at
tended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
6
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
WARNING! (Continued)
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
valve stem.
6
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
nails) from the tire.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
Tire:
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIREand not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
FIT kit.
On the TIREFIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the pressure within 15 minutes:
Sealant Hose (6):
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflaseconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomHose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
empty.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruoperate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
6
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407
(E) After Driving:
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
opening.
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomvehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
stem.
Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
Gauge (3).
vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
service center.
6
408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authobottle is locked into place.
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the TIREFIT service kit.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
vehicle.
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
of it accordingly.
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT housing. vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
6
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
Opening The Access Panel
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
Jack Fastener
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire,
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
block the left rear wheel.
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
Preparations For Jacking
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
6
414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415
6
Jack Engagement Locations
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Front Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6
418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
And Operating” for additional warnings, cautions, and
information about the spare tire, its use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a 10. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
proper lug nut torque.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Starting
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumplug nuts.
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
6
420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly Preparations For Jump-Start
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Remote Battery Posts Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic
transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
6
422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the disbattery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
charged battery.
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
with the discharged battery.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
you should have the battery and charging system in- wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
spected at your authorized dealer.
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR
and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently
CAUTION!
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
(Continued)
6
424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic
transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE (with
manual transmission), do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
shift lever override access cover (located to the right of
the shift lever).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole,
and push and hold the override release lever down.
6
426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF The
Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
If transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
BEST METHOD
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
If transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
BEST METHOD
6
428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in this section for
instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of
PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. When
securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to
front or rear suspension components. Damage to your
vehicle may result from improper towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429
Automatic Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in this section for
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km). instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of
PARK for towing.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15 miles
(24 km), then the only acceptable method of towing is with
a flatbed truck.
6
430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Manual Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .436
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
7
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Transmission (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .462
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .463
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
and Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . .488
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .490
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
7
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Remote Jump Start
(Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start
(Negative Battery Post)
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
7
1 — Remote Jump Start
(Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start
(Negative Battery Post)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Engine Oil Fill
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe vehicle is started.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the MIL.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
PROGRAMS
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
start this test over.
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
system is ready for testing.
of a normal bulb check.
7
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
7
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
Change Engine Oil
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inChecking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain months, whichever occurs first.
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
Engine Oil Selection
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
on these engines.
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
7
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
This symbol means that the oil has Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
been certified by the American temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
Petroleum Institute (API). The starting and vehicle fuel economy.
manufacturer only recommends
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
API Certified engine oils.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
should not be used.
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem- Materials Added To Engine Oil
perature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adThe engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- performance may be impaired by supplemental addiment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- tives.
tion.
Synthetic Engine Oils
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomSAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomoperation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Oper- are followed.
ating” for further information.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
7
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
filter and are recommended.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Engine Air Cleaner Filter
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
maintenance intervals.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
WARNING!
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
7
Battery Location
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING! (Continued)
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for
further warranty information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
7
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
Access Door
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
7
A/C Air Filter
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the maintenance intervals.
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
mance
of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
water
lines
or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
present,
clean
the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
equipped).
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
WARNING!
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
Adding Washer Fluid
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
7
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
motion.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
7
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless EnterN-Go™). The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON
position (RUN position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain Flush And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
7
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StanYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionmiles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conformwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Adding Coolant
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
WARNING!
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomNever add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the enmended and can result in cooling system damage. If
gine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
possible.
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
7
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MSmally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protechumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaportion of your engine which contains aluminum compoized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
nents.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Points To Remember
7
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perIn order to assure brake system performance, all brake forming underhood services.
system components should be inspected periodically. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
maintenance intervals.
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Brake System
WARNING!
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
7
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission
(If Equipped)
CAUTION!
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or damage to the transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Change Transmission Fluid
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4 maintenance intervals.
inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid,
if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Special Additives
Selection Of Lubricant
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure
optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid
specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No
chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only
the approved lubricant should be used.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
7
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and
will require more frequent fluid and filter changes.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check
Fluid And Filter Changes
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the Rear Axle
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle Fluid Level Check
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmisChecking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level
sion damage.
ground will improve the accuracy of the fluid level
reading.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
resistance built into your vehicle.
maintenance intervals.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion?
Change Axle Fluid
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Special Care
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
packaged and sealed.
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
match the color of your vehicle.
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
7
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
These products and automatic car washes may damage
the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
CAUTION!
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
7
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breaknot use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
age than glass headlights.
scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and directly on the mirror.
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folThe lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
lowed by rinsing.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
Glass Surfaces
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
rag.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Headlights
7
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
buckles do not work properly.
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
FUSES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.
Integrated Power Module
CAUTION!
• When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
Cavity
1
2
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
Mini-Fuse
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Natural
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
25 Amp Natural
25 Amp Natural
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Natural
25 Amp Natural
30 Amp Green
—
—
—
—
—
Description
Washer Motor
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/NGS
Module Feed (Batt)
Ignition Run/Start
EGR Solenoid/Alternator
Powertrain Control Module
Ignition Coils/Injectors
Headlamp Washer Relay – If Equipped
Starter
—
Windshield Wiper
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valves
Radiator Fan Lo/High
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Pump Motor
7
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Cartridge Fuse
—
50 Amp Red
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Description
—
Radiator Fan
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
Mini-Fuse
—
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
40 Amp Green
—
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
9
—
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Cavity 1 of the Rear Power Distribution
Center contains a black IOD fuse needed
for vehicle processing during assembly.
The service replacement part is a 60 Amp
yellow cartridge fuse.
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
—
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
Heated Seats – If Equipped
Fuel Pump
Audio Amplifier – If Equipped
Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC)/
Wireless Control Module (WCM)/Wireless
Ignition Node (WIN)
Power Outlet
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
Cavity
10
11*
12*
13*
14
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
25 Amp Natural
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
—
—
—
—
Description
Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
—
—
—
AC Heater Control/Cluster/Security
Module – If Equipped
Active Damper – If Equipped
Heated Seat Module – If Equipped
Instrument Cluster
Cigar Lighter (Instrument Panel)
Stop Lights
—
—
—
—
7
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
24
25
26
27
28
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
29
—
5 Amp Tan
30
—
10 Amp Red
31
32
33
34
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Description
—
—
—
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run, AC Heater Control/
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Cluster/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/STOP
LIGHT Switch
Door Modules/Power Mirrors/Steering
Control Module (SCM)
—
—
—
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
Cavity
35
Cartridge Fuse
—
Mini-Fuse
5 Amp Tan
36
—
25 Amp Natural
37
38
—
—
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
39
40
—
—
10 Amp Red
5 Amp Orange
41
42
43
44
—
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
—
—
—
—
Description
Antenna Module – If Equipped/Power
Mirrors
Hands-Free Phone – If Equipped/Radio/
Amplifier Feed
Transmission
Cargo Light/Vehicle Information Module
– If Equipped
Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
Auto Inside Rearview Mirror/Heated
Seats – If Equipped/Switch Bank
—
Front Blower Motor
Rear Window Defroster
Amplifier/Sunroof – If Equipped
7
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
*Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses (circuit
breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized
dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are fused by
the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The passenger
seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in
cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power window
switch, and the passenger power window switch are
fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 13. If you
experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
Interior Bulbs
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
W5W
Rear Courtesy/Reading
Lamps
Rear Compartment
562
(Trunk) Lamp
Overhead Console
578
Reading Lamps
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If
194
Equipped
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map
LED (Serviced at
Pocket/Cupholder
Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
Headlamp – High
Intensity Discharge (HID)
Halogen Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Front Side Marker
Tail Lamp
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Backup Lamp
Center High-Mount Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
License
Bulb Number
D1S (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
H13
3157A
PSX24W (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
168
3057K
3057K
168
921
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
168
7
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmoan authorized dealer for service.
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
WARNING!
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electroPark/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
Headlamps — If Equipped
dealer for service.
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
HID Headlamps
BULB REPLACEMENT
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp
1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or 1. Open the trunk.
similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard
2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail lamp retainer.
side to disengage the clip.
NOTE: If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material
is placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
2. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
7
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker.
Tail Lamp Retainer
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lamp 6. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
assembly.
access the bulbs.
Tail Lamp Fasteners
4. Pull back the trunk liner.
Removing Tail Lamp Assembly
7. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
5. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the 8. Disconnect the electrical connector.
tail lamp assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Reinstall tail lamp retainer.
7
Reinstall Tail Lamp Retainer
14. Close the trunk.
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
Socket Assembly
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and 1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines
19 Gallons
72 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20,
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
API Certified)
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20,
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
API Certified)
Cooling System*
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR®
11.1 Quarts
10.5 Liters
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR®
14.7 Quarts
13.9 Liters
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491
Component
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection
(3.6L and 5.7L Engine – Automatic Transmission)
Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine – Manual Transmission)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs
(Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs
(Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended
91 Octane
7
492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission –
If Equipped
Automatic Transmission –
If Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle – 3.6L Engine
Rear Axle – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4®
Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission. We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting
MS-11655, such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant
SAE 75W140 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90
(API GL-5) with MOPAR® Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
8
494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be disYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your Instrument Panel” for further information.
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter500 miles (805 km).
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495
Severe Duty All Models
Required Maintenance Intervals
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This for the required maintenance intervals.
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Check engine oil level
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
• Check windshield washer fluid level
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or service
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
required
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
•
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
8
496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals and replace if
necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Inspect the manual transmission
fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
Maintenance Chart
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary.
Adjust park brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning
filter.
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L engine). **
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
Replace spark plugs
(5.7L engine). **
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
X
X
Change the manual transmission
fluid (if equipped) if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
Most of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C),
driving in dusty conditions, or
stop and go driving.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 499
X
X
X
8
X
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, offroad, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .506
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . .509
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .506
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .510
9
504 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .511
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 505
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
506 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Owner’s name and address
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Authorized dealer name
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
solved with this process.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
P.O. Box 21–8004
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
ter should include the following information:
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 507
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
508 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 509
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS
9
510 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 511
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX 513
INDEX
10
514 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321, 324
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System). . . . . . . . . . . . .324, 327
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 68
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 71, 98, 212
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 65, 67, 68
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . .62, 65, 68
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .444
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282, 448
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447, 448
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275, 447
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455, 489
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . .324, 327
Anti-Lock Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 326
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 35
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
INDEX 515
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324, 460
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324, 327
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460, 492
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216, 324
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .95
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .28 Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482, 484
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 482
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 97
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .275
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306, 463, 464
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464, 492
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
10
516 INDEX
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 375
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .437
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Child Restraints
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .86
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .80
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240, 249
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
INDEX 517
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .264
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .457
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454, 458
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .455, 489, 490
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199, 472
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 279
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 441
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
10
518 INDEX
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Door Locks
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Door Locks, Automatic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 35
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .226
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.195
.109
.327
.477
.170
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .211
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .221
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .437
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 441
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 435
INDEX 519
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454, 490
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 375
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 489, 490
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 489
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442, 443
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 375
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 451
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282, 448
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444, 490
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 164, 212
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
10
520 INDEX
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 441
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .490
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 215
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370, 490
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473, 474
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . .183, 189
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375, 436
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
INDEX 521
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .165
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 169
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Hazard
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .165
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 142, 369
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378, 381
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378, 380
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
10
522 INDEX
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener)
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .329 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .167
. . . . . . . . . . . .383 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
. . . . . . . . . . . .183 iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 270
. . . . . . . . . . . .158
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 14
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209, 210
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410, 414
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .19, 28
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .19, 28
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 292
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 229
INDEX 523
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Kicker Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 482
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 160
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 71, 98, 212
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 326
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216, 324
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 182
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .164, 165
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . .211
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 215
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 484
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 169
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 214
10
524 INDEX
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 210
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 182
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .220
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 182
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .166
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 182
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482, 484
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .220
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .217, 361
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 164, 212
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .210
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378, 379
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 35
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
INDEX 525
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .220, 437
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299, 462, 464
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 464
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 182
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Mopar Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438, 509
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 65, 69
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 65, 68
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .370, 490
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210, 215
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210, 215
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 490
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
10
526 INDEX
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 441
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 441
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444, 490
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 489
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442, 443, 489
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212, 397
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 510
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .343
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .195
INDEX 527
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.350
.457
.275
.272
.200
.174
.157
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .19, 28
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .19, 28
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .272
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
10
528 INDEX
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 49, 97
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 50
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
INDEX 529
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . .220
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240, 249
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 164, 212
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 354, 411
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 290
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
10
530 INDEX
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .272
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 482
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .58
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .275
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant. . . . . . . . .211, 398
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .343
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 347, 511
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410, 414
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
INDEX 531
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410, 413, 414
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343, 344
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336, 347
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.336
.384
.158
.380
.125
.427
.384
.392
.384
.125
.392
.316
.328
.380
.391
.383
.385
.390
.384
10
532 INDEX
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306, 463
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463, 492
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .28
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 28
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210, 215
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 44
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164, 212
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode . . . . . . . .247
Operating Instructions CD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . .239
Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio
Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Uconnect® phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .264
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . .184, 186, 188
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
INDEX 533
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 378, 379
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 482
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442, 443
Voice Command
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .210
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 168, 451
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 194
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 279
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 168
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2014 Challenger
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
FCA US LLC
14D491-126-AD
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Challenger
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement